JVC CD Player MA372IEN User Manual

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-G240/KD-G140  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0485-001A  
[J]  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ESPAÑOL  
ENGLISH  
For safety...  
Warning  
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used  
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
Caution  
To keep discs clean  
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.  
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Unusual shape  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
[European Union only]  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
PREPARATIONS  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
How to reset your unit  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Detaching the control panel  
Basic operations  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”  
as the playback source.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-G240)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level 2:  
up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 64 characters; Joliet:  
up to 32 characters; Windows long file name: up to 126  
characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an  
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.  
Tuner operations  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be  
automatically tuned in.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the  
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Basic settings  
Enter PSM menu.  
Cancel the display  
demonstration  
Set the clock  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD  
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats (for KD-G240).  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press  
SRC to select another playback source.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
Adjust the hour.  
Adjust the minute.  
Deactivate the display  
demonstration.  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Finish  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
1– EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Finish  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Indication  
DEMO  
Item ( : Initial) Setting  
• The buttons on the unit do not work as you If you press M MODE, some buttons work differently from it  
intended.  
original function. Wait for 5 seconds or press M MODE again.  
DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is  
done for about 20 seconds.  
Cancels.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit.  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
OFF  
off.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc ejects.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the  
power is turned off.  
CLOCK H (Hour)  
1 12  
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used  
for recording.  
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 59  
DIMMER  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
SCROLL  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of  
the setting.  
L/O MODE  
WOOFER*2  
AUX ADJ  
REAR  
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the speakers  
(through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a subwoofer.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
WOOFER  
:
LOW  
MID  
HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level when changing the source from external component connected to the  
AUX input jack on the control panel.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
TAG DISP  
(for KD-G240)  
AMP GAIN*3  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than  
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
HIGH PWR  
AREA US  
:
:
AREA  
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to  
10 kHz/200 kHz.  
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz  
(100 kHz during auto search).  
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/  
100kHz.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
AREA EU  
AREA SA  
:
:
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than  
“VOL 30.”  
2
3
*
*
SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio amplifier section  
Tuner section  
CD player section  
General  
Frequency Range:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Power Output:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4  
1% THD+N  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
and  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4  
)  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
4
(4  
Bass:  
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz  
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
load (full scale)  
to 8  
allowance)  
Less than measurable limit  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)  
Mass (approx.):  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
MP3 Decoding Format (for KD-G240):  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 35 dB  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Frequency Response:  
)  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format  
®
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 k  
Output Impedance: 1 k  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
)  
(for KD-G240):  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Please reset your unit  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Still having trouble??  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone  
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.  
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)  
http://www.jvc.com  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
Notes:  
Prepare this before installation  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to  
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals  
of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
careful not to touch it when removing this  
unit.  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Heat sink  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
3 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
A
D
B
E
C
Control panel  
Power cord  
Sleeve  
Washer (ø5)  
Trim plate  
G
I
J
K
F
Mounting bolt—  
M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4");  
M5 x 15 mm (M5 x 5/8")  
H
Handles  
Remote controller  
Battery  
Lock nut (M5)  
Rubber cushion  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
In dash-mounting  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage  
the fuse on the rear.  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
When using the optional stay  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
Stay (option)  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Dashboard  
Bracket*  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws  
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Install the unit at an angle of  
less than 30˚.  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Typical connections  
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”  
(See “General settings—PSM.”)  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
or automatic antenna if any  
Rear ground terminal  
Line out  
JVC Amplifier  
Antenna  
terminal  
15 A fuse  
Rear  
speakers  
Front speakers  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER”  
(See “General settings—PSM.”)  
You can also connect a subwoofer to  
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
Connect only the front speakers if your  
speaker system is two-speaker system.  
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting to the  
car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant  
12 V)  
White with black stripe  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis  
of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,  
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Yellow *2  
3
*
*
Front speaker (left)  
White  
or  
JVC Amplifier  
Fuse block  
Subwoofer  
Gray with black stripe  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in  
the fuse block  
4
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Front speaker (right) Gray  
Green with black stripe  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be  
seriously damaged.  
Blue with white  
stripe  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic antenna if  
any (200 mA max.)  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Rear speaker (left)  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Rear speaker (right)  
Purple  
4 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-G394/KD-G244  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
0907DTSMDTJEIN  
GET0493-001A  
[UI]  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ESPAÑOL  
ENGLISH  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
To keep discs clean  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
[European Union only]  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Unusual shape  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
PREPARATIONS  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
How to reset your unit  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Detaching the control panel  
Basic operations  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-G394)  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”  
as the playback source.  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be  
automatically tuned in.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the  
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names Basic settings  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
Enter PSM menu.  
Cancel the display  
demonstration  
Set the clock  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level 2:  
up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 64 characters; Joliet:  
up to 32 characters; Windows long file name: up to 126  
characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an  
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio  
CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G394 can also play back CD-Rs/  
CD-RWs in MP3/WMA formats.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press  
SRC to select another playback source.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
Adjust the hour.  
Adjust the minute.  
Deactivate the display  
demonstration.  
Finish  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Remote sensor (for KD-G394)  
DO NOT expose to strong light.  
Check the current clock time/other information.  
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”  
Control panel  
Remote controller—RM-RK50  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G394.  
• Turn on the power.  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
7 Installing battery  
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
• Store out of reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.  
• Do not dispose in fire.  
Detach the panel.  
Volume control.  
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback  
Select the source.  
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.  
source if there is no disc in the unit.  
7 Features  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
Display window  
• Selects the sound mode  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
Playback mode / item indicator  
: For KD-G394  
Disc indicator  
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Selects the source.  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.  
KD-G394: Disc information indicators  
Tr (track) indicator  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• KD-G394: Folder number  
(for MP3/WMA discs)  
• Volume level indicator  
• Time countdown indicator  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
Main display (time,  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
playback information) indicator  
Disc operations  
Radio operations  
Eject disc.  
• Press SRC to  
listen to another  
playback source.  
Select preset station.  
• You can also use 5 / ∞  
to select preset station.  
4 / ¢  
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* (for MP3/  
WMA) number (01 – 06).  
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* (for MP3/  
WMA) number (07 – 12).  
* KD-G394: Folders are required to assigned with  
2-digit numbers at the beginning.  
Select “FM/AM.”  
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.  
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.  
5 / : KD-G394: Go to the next or previous  
folder (for MP3/WMA discs).  
Select the bands.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
• MO indicator lights up.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
Selecting the playback modes  
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...  
Changing the display information  
TRK RPT : Plays the current track  
repeatedly.  
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current  
folder repeatedly.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text a WMA disc (for KD-G394)  
Manual presetting  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
FLDR RND*: Plays all tracks of the current  
folder, then the tracks of the  
next folder at random.  
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current  
disc at random.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
* KD-G394: Only for MP3/WMA.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
External component operations  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Skipping a track quickly during play  
• KD-G394: For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track  
within the same folder.  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is  
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.  
Example: Select track 32  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To avoid the sudden increase of the output level when  
changing the source, adjust the auxiliary input level (AUX ADJ)  
accordingly.  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
(See “AUX ADJ” of “General settings—PSM.”)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
SETTINGS  
LOUD*3 (loudness) : Boost low and high frequencies to LOUD ON or  
produce a well-balanced sound at LOUD OFF  
a low volume level.  
Sound adjustments  
Adjusting the sound  
VOL (volume)  
: Adjust the volume.  
00 to 50  
(or 00 to 30)*4  
Preset values  
BAS  
LOUD  
(loudness)  
MID  
TRE  
1
(bass) (mid-range) (treble)  
Indication (For)  
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the adjustment you have made  
is stored for the currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be applied to all sound modes  
(iEQ).  
BAS*1 (bass)  
MID*1  
:
:
Adjust the bass.  
–06 to +06  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2
3
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound –06 to +06  
level.  
*
*
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03  
+01  
+02  
+04  
+03  
+02  
+03  
+02  
+01  
+03  
(mid-range)  
00  
TRE*1 (treble)  
FAD*2 (fader)  
BAL (balance)  
:
:
:
Adjust the treble.  
–06 to +06  
4
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.  
+01  
–02  
00  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. R06 to F06  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance. L06 to R06  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
See reverse page \  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Finish  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
Indication  
DEMO  
Item ( : Initial) Setting  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit.  
DEMO ON  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is  
done for about 20 seconds.  
Cancels.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc ejects.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
CLK DISP*1  
ON  
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned  
off.  
OFF  
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the  
power is turned off.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used  
for recording.  
CLOCK H (Hour)  
1 12  
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 59  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
DIMMER  
SCROLL  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of  
the setting.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level when changing the source from external component connected to the  
AUX input jack on the control panel.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
TAG DISP  
(for KD-G394)  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
AMP GAIN*2  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than  
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
2
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than  
“VOL 30.”  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Audio amplifier section  
Tuner section  
CD player section  
General  
Maximum Power Output:  
Frequency Range:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Power Requirement:  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System:  
Negative ground  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
KD-G394: MP3 Decoding Format (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3):  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
KD-G394: WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
)
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
4
(4  
to 8  
allowance)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz  
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
)  
Less than measurable limit  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
KD-G394: Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 k  
KD-G394: Output Impedance: 1 k  
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
®
Format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
load (full scale)  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
Notes:  
Prepare this before installation  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to  
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals  
of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
careful not to touch it when removing this  
unit.  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Heat sink  
* Have you reset your unit?  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
A/B  
C
D
E
F
Hard case (for  
KD-G394)/  
Control panel  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
Power cord  
Washer (ø5)  
For KD-G394  
H
J
K
L
G
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm;  
M5 × 15 mm)  
I
Handles  
Remote controller  
Battery  
Lock nut (M5)  
Rubber cushion  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
In dash-mounting  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
When you stand the unit,  
be careful not to damage  
the fuse on the rear.  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
For KD-G394  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
When using the optional stay  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
Stay (option)  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*  
Dashboard  
Bracket*  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*  
Install the unit at an angle of  
less than 30˚.  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Typical connections  
Connecting the external amplifier (for KD-G394)  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Rear ground terminal  
Line out (only for KD-G394)  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
or automatic antenna if any  
Antenna  
terminal  
15 A fuse  
Rear  
speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
Connect only the front speakers if your  
speaker system is two-speaker system.  
Signal cord *1  
Front speakers  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting to  
the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch)  
White with black stripe  
Yellow *2  
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be  
turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated  
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Front speaker (left)  
White  
(constant 12 V)  
3
Fuse block  
*
Gray with black stripe  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in  
the fuse block  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
Front speaker (right) Gray  
Green with black stripe  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be  
seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any  
(250 mA max.)  
Rear speaker (left)  
Green  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Purple with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
(200 mA max.)—only for KD-G394  
Rear speaker (right)  
Purple  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0486-001A  
[U/UH]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 11  
Maintenance ................................... 13  
More about this unit ........................ 14  
Troubleshooting.............................. 16  
Specifications.................................. 17  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:  
RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
(standby/on attenuator) button  
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),  
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
q 4 / ¢ buttons  
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial  
BAND button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
/
z
RPT (repeat) button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
3
4
5
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and  
12.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level appears.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Storing stations in memory  
Radio operations  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
! Start searching for a station.  
When a station is received,  
searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the  
same button again.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/  
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
directly  
Clock Ô Frequency  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
~ Turn on the power.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA disc):  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can  
skip tracks within the same folder  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 12)  
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
1
2
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Changing the display information  
7
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
FLDR RPT *  
:
:
The current track. [  
All tracks of the current folder.  
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
Continued on the next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
7
Random play  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
1
2
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
Cancels.  
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or  
a WMA disc.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MIDTRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4  
Adjust the volume.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 12 for details.)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Other external component  
operations  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table on page 12.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.  
Portable audio player, etc  
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
Continued on the next page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power  
Clock display  
is turned off.  
OFF  
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP *3  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker  
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”  
that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
For KD-G396/KD-G395.  
2
3
*
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connectors  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Center holder  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the  
same type as those which are detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/  
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/  
WMA formats.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA  
disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– Joliet: up to 32 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
AM:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, TH  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Installation/Connection Manual  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, TH  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0486-006A  
[U/UH]  
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
™¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õß§≥‰¡‰  
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß  
µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
À¡“¬‡Àµ:  
Notes:  
„™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß ¥‡°π°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 ∂ß 8 )  
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√¥ (¥  
°“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæπ¢« “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæπ “¬‰ø  
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
Ÿ
Àπ12 §”·π–π”)  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:  
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–π𠙥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°  
°Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π  
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π À“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√≥“ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
≈ß∫√√® ( ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395)/À𓪥  
ª≈Õ°À¡  
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß  
Washer (ø5)  
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)  
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
≈°µ¥  
(M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 15 ¡¡.)  
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°  
Handles  
§π∫ß§∫  
Remote controller  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
Battery  
·∫µ‡µÕ√  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
°“√µ¥µß  
(
°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀ𓪠 
í
)
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§≥¡ª≠À“À√ÕµÕß°“√¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°∫™¥µ¥µß °√≥“ª√°…“°∫º¢“¬‡§√Õ߇  
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…  
™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫π∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß  
Do the required electrical connections.  
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥  
For KD-G396/KD-G395 /  
”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
°“√∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫  
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
„ §π∫ß§2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ  
„À‡≈Õ𙥪√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ß§∫∑ß Õß  
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π  
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°À¡  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬µ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑  
Stay (option)  
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Fire wall  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
ºπß°π‰ø  
Dashboard  
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Screw (option)  
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
Pocket  
°–‡ª“–  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
µ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*1 ‡¡Õ§≥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫¢π √–«ßÕ¬“∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬  
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„øø“  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™  
ÿ
ÿ
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–  
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ  
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫  
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»  
ÿ
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3
ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π  
Line out (see diagram ) — only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ ) ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ  
Rear ground terminal  
®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß  
Antenna terminal  
15 A fuse  
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A  
¢« “¬Õ“°“»  
Ignition switch  
«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥  
Black  
¥”  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
Yellow *2  
‡À≈Õß *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ  
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)  
Fuse block  
·ºßø«  
Red  
·¥ß  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«  
Blue  
»ø“  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.) — only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA) ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ  
White with black stripe  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
White  
¢“«·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“  
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”  
‡¢¬«  
¡«ß·∂∫¥”  
¡«ß  
¢“«  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Left speaker (front)  
≈”‚æß¢«“ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)  
1
2
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power  
cannot be turned on.  
¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ° ( ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ)  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æÕ‡æ¡§ÿ≥ ¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥Õπ Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–  
°Õ∫π‰¥  
∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™  
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰«  
Remote lead  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•  
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Front speakers  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂  
µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)  
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
ÿ
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
ø« ¢“¥  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
‡ ¬ß√∫°«π  
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
ALAT PENERIMA CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BUKU PETUNJUK  
GET0486-004A  
[UN]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 11  
Maintenance ................................... 13  
More about this unit ........................ 14  
Troubleshooting.............................. 16  
Specifications.................................. 17  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:  
RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
(standby/on attenuator) button  
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),  
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
q 4 / ¢ buttons  
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial  
BAND button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
/
z
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
3
4
5
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and  
12.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level appears.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing stations in memory  
Radio operations  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
! Start searching for a station.  
When a station is received,  
searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the  
same button again.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/  
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
directly  
Clock Ô Frequency  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
~ Turn on the power.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA disc):  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can  
skip tracks within the same folder  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 12)  
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
1
2
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Changing the display information  
7
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
FLDR RPT *  
:
:
The current track. [  
All tracks of the current folder.  
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Random play  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
1
2
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
Cancels.  
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or  
a WMA disc.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MIDTRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4  
Adjust the volume.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 12 for details.)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other external component  
operations  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table on page 12.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.  
Portable audio player, etc  
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power  
Clock display  
is turned off.  
OFF  
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP *3  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker  
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”  
that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
For KD-G396/KD-G395.  
2
3
*
*
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connectors  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Center holder  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the  
same type as those which are detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/  
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/  
WMA formats.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA  
disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– Joliet: up to 32 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
AM:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0486-009A  
[UN]  
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli  
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
WARNINGS  
PERINGATAN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Notes:  
Catatan:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering putus, konsultasikan pada  
dealer.  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 sampai 8 ). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 12 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan alat penerima ini.  
Heat sink / Pendingin  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi  
dealer audio mobil JVC anda.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
Kotak keras (untuk KD-G396/KD-G395)/Panel kontrol  
Selongsong  
Plat rapi  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Kabel power  
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
Baut bingkai  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / Untuk KD-G396/KD-G395  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan  
teknisi yang berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan listrik yang  
diperlukan.  
For KD-G396/KD-G395 /  
Untuk KD-G396/KD-G395  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan alat penerima  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima  
dapat dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima  
tanpa menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada  
bagian depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–  
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.  
2
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Periksa perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang  
tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.  
Line out (see diagram )—only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
Keluaran (lihat diagram )—hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395  
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
Black  
Hitam  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Yellow *2  
Kuning *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)—only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)—hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah  
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) / Penyambungan penguat eksternal (hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395)  
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.  
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.  
Remote lead  
Ujung jauh  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Speaker-speaker  
Penguat JVC  
belakang  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• The fuse blows.  
• Sekring putus.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0486-005A  
[UT]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 11  
Maintenance ................................... 13  
More about this unit ........................ 14  
Troubleshooting.............................. 16  
Specifications.................................. 17  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:  
RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
(standby/on attenuator) button  
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),  
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
q 4 / ¢ buttons  
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial  
BAND button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
/
z
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
3
4
5
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and  
12.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level appears.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing stations in memory  
Radio operations  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
! Start searching for a station.  
When a station is received,  
searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the  
same button again.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/  
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)  
directly  
Clock Ô Frequency  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
~ Turn on the power.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA disc):  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can  
skip tracks within the same folder  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 12)  
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
1
2
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Changing the display information  
7
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
FLDR RPT *  
:
:
The current track. [  
All tracks of the current folder.  
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Random play  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
1
2
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
Cancels.  
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or  
a WMA disc.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MIDTRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4  
Adjust the volume.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 12 for details.)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other external component  
operations  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table on page 12.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.  
Portable audio player, etc  
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power  
Clock display  
is turned off.  
OFF  
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP *3  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker  
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”  
that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
For KD-G396/KD-G395.  
2
3
*
*
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connectors  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Center holder  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words  
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or  
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear  
intermittent sounds.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the  
same type as those which are detected first if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA  
files.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/  
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/  
WMA formats.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA  
disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– Joliet: up to 32 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
For KD-G396/KD-G395:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
AM:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, CT  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0486-010A  
[UT]  
ENGLISH  
中文  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
系統,需要 一個電  
WARNINGS  
警告  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前  
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。  
安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
注意:  
Notes:  
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向  
和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明的第 12 頁。)  
為防止電短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink / 散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零件清單  
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
硬盒(對應 KD-G396/KD-G395)/控制面  
外套機殼 裝飾框  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈(ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母(M5)  
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
緊固  
螺栓  
M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / 對應 KD-G396/KD-G395  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Battery  
電池  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
下面  
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
For KD-G396/KD-G395  
對應 KD-G396/KD-G395  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固  
在儀表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
,應將本機後部的定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然  
後輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手,本機隨  
之拉出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
支撐架(選用的)  
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘(選用的)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Note When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws are used,  
they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
線的顏色導線。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Line out (see diagram )— only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
輸出端子(參閱圖表 )僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395  
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背接地端子  
Antenna terminal  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
天線端子  
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接  
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)— only for KD-G396/KD-G395  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
紫色  
White  
白色  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
左揚聲器(前  
右揚聲器(前  
左揚聲器(後置  
右揚聲器(後置  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
不隨本機提供。  
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
檢查之前  
,必須把這導線接上,否則  
不能開啟電源  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) 連接至外部功率放大器(僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395)  
B
/
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行  
遙控。  
將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
車的音響系統。  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Remote lead  
遙控導線  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)  
JVC Amplifier  
後置  
Rear speakers  
揚聲器  
JVC 功率放大器  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
信號導線(不隨本機提供)  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電  
,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。  
故障排除  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
電源不能接通。  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
噪音干擾音響。  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“”是否共同接地?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重  
您的機組?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 5.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0484-003A  
[EX/EU]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Warning:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to reset your unit  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5 / buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341.............  
4
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
5
5
Radio operations .............................  
6
FM RDS operations...........................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....  
7
7
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Disc operations................................  
9
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
9
Sound adjustments.......................... 12  
General settings — PSM .................. 13  
Other external component operations .... 15  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Detaching the control panel  
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and  
European countries  
Attaching the control panel  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G343 / KD-G341.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
Parts identification  
Display window  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
1 0 (eject) button  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
/ ¢ buttons  
Loading slot  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—  
JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER  
d
f
BAND button  
Display window  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
g
h
9 5(up)/(down) buttons  
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
Control dial  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
j
k
l
/
z
x
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on  
pages 13 – 15.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
! For FM/AM tuner  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
Adjust the volume.  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
page 12.)  
Clock time is shown on the  
display for about 5 seconds. See  
also page 13.  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
Storing stations in memory  
! Start searching for a station.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
1
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 14)  
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)  
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 14)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see the  
following.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
types.  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.  
Frequency Ô Clock  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 9).  
Continued on the next page  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 14).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
Finish the procedure.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals. The PTY  
indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme  
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to  
the beginning)  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,  
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M  
(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,  
OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,  
RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,  
NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.  
Disc operations  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
Playing a disc in the unit  
~ Turn on the power.  
Ÿ
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 14.  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To stop play and eject  
the disc  
Other main functions  
• Press SRC to listen to  
another playback source.  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To fast-forward or reverse  
the track  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To go to the next or  
previous track  
1
2
To go to the next or  
previous folder (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01,  
02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA disc):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT : The current track. [  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
]
A = B = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
] = Track title (file  
] = (back to the beginning)  
[
]
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name  
7
Random play  
[
] = (back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder, then  
the tracks of the next folder and so  
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Clock with the current track number  
on. [  
]
ALL RND : All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
2
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the sound  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
music genre (c-EQ: custom equalizer).  
1
2
1
2
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
Indication, [Range]  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
+03 +01  
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
+01  
–02  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+04 +01  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
+02  
00  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30]*3  
Adjust the volume.  
+02 +03  
OFF  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
2
3
*
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table below, on page 14 and 15.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].  
Cancels.  
CLK DISP *1  
Clock display  
ON  
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].  
OFF  
CLOCK H  
0 23 (1 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK M  
00 59  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
24H  
12H  
:
See also page 5 for setting.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select  
“OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Continued on the next page  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
CLK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
AF-REG *2  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
AF  
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [9, 17].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
• AF REG  
• OFF  
Cancels.  
PTY-STBY *2  
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].  
PTY standby  
TA VOL *2  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOL 00  
[Initial: VOL 15]  
– VOL 50  
(or VOL 00  
– VOL 30)*3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
TEL  
• MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
• OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
Telephone muting  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
2
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
3
4
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
• LOW PWR  
• HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
• AUTO  
• WIDE  
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Adjust the sound as you want.  
(See page 12.)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
To check the clock time while listening to an  
external component  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
AUX IN Ô Clock  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
Do not use the following discs:  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Warped disc  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
Center holder  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/  
CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. On the other hand,  
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 14.)  
Continued on the next page  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
Media Audio.  
®
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
200 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
MW Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
LW Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Dear Customer,  
Cher(e) client(e),  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes  
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité  
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Allemagne  
Germany  
EN, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, FR  
GET0484-010A  
[EX/EU]  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.  
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez  
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la  
voiture après l’installation.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
Remarques:  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière  
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 et 8 ). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 15 du  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande  
isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant  
cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,  
will be seriously damaged.  
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des  
enceintes de votre voiture.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur  
autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A
B
C
Control panel  
Panneau de commande  
Sleeve  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Plaque d’assemblage  
D
E
F
Power cord  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Washer (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
G
H
I
Mounting bolt  
Rubber cushion  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Handles  
Poignées  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
Boulon de montage  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin  
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
d’approvisionnement.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien  
qualifié.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées  
pour maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du  
hauban en option  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil  
scans utiliser de manchon  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Stay (option)  
Hauban (en option)  
Fire wall  
Cloison  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Screw (option)  
Vis (en option)  
Pocket  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins  
de 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de  
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
Typical Connections / Raccordements typiques  
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en  
couleur.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the aerial cord.  
1
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1  
(initial position) to fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.  
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.  
Remarque: Si votre véhicule ne possède pas de borne accessoire, déplacez le fusible de la position de fusible  
1 (position originale) à la position de fusible 2 et connectez le fil rouge (A7) à la borne positive (+) de la  
batterie.  
• Le fil jaune (A4) n’est pas utilisé dans ce cas.  
15 A fuse  
Fusible 15 A  
Line out (see diagram  
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Fuse position 2 / Position de fusible 2  
Fuse position 1 / Position de fusible 1  
Aerial terminal  
Borne de l’antenne  
Rear ground terminal  
Borne arrière de masse  
Ignition switch  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Black  
Noir  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow *2  
Jaune *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture  
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Fuse block  
Porte-fusible  
Red  
Rouge  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
(200 mA max.)  
Brown  
Marron  
To cellular phone system  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
White with black stripe  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise, the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.  
Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de  
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils  
this unit unused.  
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
Remote lead  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne  
automatique s’il y en a une  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Front speakers  
Enceintes avant  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place not coated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas  
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil  
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• The fuse blows.  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.  
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 5.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
GET0484-006A  
[EY]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Warning:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to reset your unit  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5 / buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341.............  
4
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
5
5
Radio operations .............................  
6
FM RDS operations...........................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....  
7
7
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Disc operations................................  
9
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
9
Sound adjustments.......................... 12  
General settings — PSM .................. 13  
Other external component operations .... 15  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Detaching the control panel  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
Attaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G343 / KD-G341.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel —  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
Parts identification  
Display window  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
1 0 (eject) button  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
/ ¢ buttons  
Loading slot  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—  
JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER  
d
f
BAND button  
Display window  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
g
h
9 5(up)/(down) buttons  
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
Control dial  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
j
k
l
/
z
x
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on  
pages 13 – 15.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
! For FM/AM tuner  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
Adjust the volume.  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
page 12.)  
Clock time is shown on the  
display for about 5 seconds. See  
also page 13.  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
Storing stations in memory  
! Start searching for a station.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
1
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 14)  
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)  
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 14)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see the  
following.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
types.  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.  
Frequency Ô Clock  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 9).  
Continued on the next page  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 14).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
Finish the procedure.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals. The PTY  
indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme  
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to  
the beginning)  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,  
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M  
(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,  
OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,  
RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,  
NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.  
Disc operations  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
Playing a disc in the unit  
~ Turn on the power.  
Ÿ
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 14.  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To stop play and eject  
the disc  
Other main functions  
• Press SRC to listen to  
another playback source.  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To fast-forward or reverse  
the track  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To go to the next or  
previous track  
1
2
To go to the next or  
previous folder (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01,  
02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA disc):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT : The current track. [  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
]
A = B = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
] = Track title (file  
] = (back to the beginning)  
[
]
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name  
7
Random play  
[
] = (back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder, then  
the tracks of the next folder and so  
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Clock with the current track number  
on. [  
]
ALL RND : All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
2
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the sound  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
music genre (c-EQ: custom equalizer).  
1
2
1
2
Preset values  
BAS  
TRE  
LOUD  
(bass) (treble) (loudness)  
Indication (For)  
Indication, [Range]  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
00  
00  
OFF  
ON  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
+03 +01  
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
+01  
–02  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+04 +01  
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
+02  
00  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30]*3  
Adjust the volume.  
+02 +03  
OFF  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
2
3
*
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table below, on page 14 and 15.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].  
Cancels.  
CLK DISP *1  
Clock display  
ON  
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].  
OFF  
CLOCK H  
0 23 (1 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK M  
00 59  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
24H  
12H  
:
See also page 5 for setting.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select  
“OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
Continued on the next page  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
CLK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
AF-REG *2  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
AF  
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [9, 17].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
• AF REG  
• OFF  
Cancels.  
PTY-STBY *2  
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].  
PTY standby  
TA VOL *2  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOL 00  
[Initial: VOL 15]  
– VOL 50  
(or VOL 00  
– VOL 30)*3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
TEL  
• MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
• OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
Telephone muting  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
2
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
3
4
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [11].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
• LOW PWR  
• HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
• AUTO  
• WIDE  
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Adjust the sound as you want.  
(See page 12.)  
Portable audio player, etc.  
To check the clock time while listening to an  
external component  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
AUX IN Ô Clock  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
Do not use the following discs:  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Warped disc  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
Center holder  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/  
CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. On the other hand,  
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated  
without deactivating Alternative Frequency  
Reception. (See page 14.)  
Continued on the next page  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
Media Audio.  
®
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,  
200 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
MW Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
LW Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на  
соответствующую страницу  
Dear Customer,  
Уважаемый клиент.  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Данное устройство соответствует действительным  
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной  
совместимости и электрической безопасности.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited в Европе:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
Германия  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien  
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit  
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited ist:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
0807DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0484-013A  
[EY]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В  
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш  
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор  
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем  
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и  
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
После установки обязательно заземлите данное  
устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
WARNINGS  
WARNUNGEN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse  
installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des  
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
Примечания:  
Notes:  
Hinweise:  
Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем  
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной  
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели  
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 до 8 Ω). Если  
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в  
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum  
Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.  
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von  
impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit  
einer Impedanz von 4 bis 8 ). Wenn die Maximalleistung  
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um  
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 15 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте  
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.  
Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.  
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen  
der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband  
umwickeln.  
Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau  
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Радиатор  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen  
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и  
подключению громкоговорителей:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der  
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к  
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей  
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему  
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer  
beschädigt wird.  
VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des  
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die  
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-  
Autoradiohändler.  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Список деталей для установки и  
подключения  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с  
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
A
B
C
Control panel  
Schalttafel  
Панель управления  
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Муфта  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Декоративную панель  
D
E
F
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Кабель питания  
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
G
H
I
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 15 мм)  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Резиновый чехол  
Handles  
Griffe  
Рычаги  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.  
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,  
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста  
JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие  
принадлежности.  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have  
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei  
irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich  
des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed vertreibt.  
by a qualified technician.  
Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это  
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen. устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen  
Anschlüsse vor.  
Выполните необходимые подключения  
контактов, как показано на оборотной  
стороне этой инструкции.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Removing the unit  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Удаление устройства  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so  
that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie  
in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt  
werden kann.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как  
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker- When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Option / При использовании дополнительной стойки  
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство  
на место.  
Stay (option)  
Anker (Option)  
Стойка  
(дополнительно)  
Fire wall  
Feuerwand  
Стена  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Приборная панель  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Screw (option)  
Schraube (Option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Pocket  
Taschen  
Карман  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von  
weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Hinweis  
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.  
Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
1
2
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der  
Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить  
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.  
Hе входит в комплект поставки.  
2
*
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
Typical Connections / Typische Anschlüsse / Типичные подключения  
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте  
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может  
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen.  
body may be different in color.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова  
können sich farblich unterscheiden.  
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
1 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в  
1 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,  
specified in the illustration below.  
указанном ниже порядке.  
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
2 Подключите кабель антенны.  
2 Connect the aerial cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
2 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
3 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
3 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к  
устройству.  
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move  
the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to fuse position 2,  
and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.  
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.  
Hinweis: Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über eine  
Примечание: Если в Вашем автомобиле никакого  
вспомогательного разъема не имеется, переставьте  
предохранитель из положения 1 предохранителя  
(первоначальное положение) в положение 2 предохранителя  
и подключите красный провод (А7) к положительному (+)  
полюсу аккумулятора.  
Zubehöranschlußklemme, die Sicherung von der 1. Sicherungsposition  
(Erstposition) in die 2. Sicherungsposition versetzen, die rote Leitung  
(A7) an der (+) Batterieanschlußklemme anschließen.  
Die gelbe Leitung (A4) wird in diesem Fall nicht verwendet.  
Желтый провод (А4) в этом случае не используется.  
Line out (see diagram  
Schutz kappen Signalausgang  
(siehe Schaltplan  
)
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Предохранитель 15 A  
)
К выходу (см. схему  
)
Fuse position 2 / 2. Sicherungsposition /  
Положение 2 предохранителя  
Fuse position 1 / 1. Sicherungsposition /  
Положение 1 предохранителя  
Aerial terminal  
Antennen-  
anschlußklemme  
Разъем антенны  
Rear ground terminal  
Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme  
Задний разъем заземления  
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Переключатель зажигания  
Black  
Schwarz  
Черный  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Yellow*2  
Gelb*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen  
an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
Желтый*2  
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Блок предохранителя  
Red  
Rot  
Красный  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Синий с белой полосой  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden  
(max. 200 mA)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)  
Brown  
Braun  
Коричневый  
To cellular phone system  
Zur Mobiltelefon  
К системе сотового телефона  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Белый с черной  
полосой  
White  
Weiß  
Белый  
Gray with black stripe  
Grau mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Серый с черной  
полосой  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Grün mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Зеленый с черной  
полосой  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Lila mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Purple  
Grau  
Grün  
Lila  
Серый  
Зеленый  
Пурпурный  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
1
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected; otherwise, the power cannot be turned on.  
*
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,  
иначе питание не включится.  
2
2
2
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem  
Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die  
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu  
erweitern.  
Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an  
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses  
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.  
Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am  
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses  
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.  
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной  
стереосистемы.  
Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с  
белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого  
оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого  
устройства.  
Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного  
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте  
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства  
неиспользованными.  
Remote lead  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Провод внешнего устройства  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние  
громкоговорители  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC-усилитель  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Front speakers  
Vordere Lautsprecher  
Передние громкоговорители  
3
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis  
of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint,  
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause  
damage to the unit.  
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen  
des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die  
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor  
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß  
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому  
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской  
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как  
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может  
привести к повреждению данного устройства.  
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?  
• Питание не включается.  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Ton verzerrt.  
• Звук искажен.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an  
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси  
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-G347  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
0907DTSMDTJEIN  
GET0491-001A  
[EE]  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
Basic operations  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be  
automatically tuned in.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files  
[European Union only]  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the  
preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the  
preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is also  
activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-  
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without  
deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level  
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;  
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up  
to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an  
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.  
PREPARATIONS  
How to reset your unit  
Detaching the control panel  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the  
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD  
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
Basic settings  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
To keep discs clean  
Adjust.  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
Finish  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Available characters on the display  
Available characters  
Display indications  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Unusual shape  
1– EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Radio operations  
Control panel  
Check the current clock time/other information.  
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”  
Note:  
• Turn on the power.  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
FM1 and FM2:  
87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz  
FM3:  
65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz  
Select preset station.  
Detach the panel.  
Select “FM/AM.”  
Select the source.  
Volume control.  
Select the bands.  
*You cannot select “CD” as the playback  
source if there is no disc in the unit.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
Display window  
MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Playback mode / item indicator  
Disc indicator  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
• MO indicator lights up.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.  
Disc information indicators  
Tr (track) indicator  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
RDS indicators  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Folder number  
• Volume level indicator  
• Time countdown indicator  
Main display (time,  
playback information) indicator  
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer)  
Manual presetting  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Eject disc.  
• Press SRC to  
listen to another  
playback source.  
FM RDS operations  
Storing your favourite programme type  
You can store six favourite programme types.  
Searching for your favourite FM RDS  
programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favourite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
4 / ¢  
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* number  
Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):  
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.  
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.  
5 / : Go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA discs).  
(01 – 06).  
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* number  
(07 – 12).  
* Folders are required to assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning.  
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Example: Storing “ROCK M” into preset number 4.  
Select a PTY code.  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
Select one of your favourite programme  
types or a PTY code.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
or  
Selecting the playback modes  
Changing the display information  
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...  
If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code  
as you have selected, that station is  
tuned in.  
TRK RPT : Plays the current track  
repeatedly.  
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current  
folder repeatedly.  
Finish.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text  
a WMA disc  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
A = B = Disc title/  
performer*1 = Track  
title*1 = (back to the  
beginning)  
A = B = Album name/  
performer (folder name*2)  
= Track title (file name*2)  
= (back to the beginning)  
FLDR RND* : Plays all tracks of the current  
folder, then the tracks of the  
next folder at random.  
Standby receptions  
Tracing the same programme —  
TA Standby Reception  
Network-Tracking Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “General settings—PSM.”  
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current  
disc at random.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
A
: The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
: Clock with the current track number  
B
To activate/deactivate  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated.  
To activate TA Standby Reception,  
tune in to another station providing  
RDS signals required for TA Standby  
Reception.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is  
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.  
2
Skipping a track quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track within the  
same folder.  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency  
areas (01 – 05)  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
Example: Select track 32  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favourite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
To activate and select your favourite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see “General settings—PSM.”  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals.  
External component operations  
Automatic station selection —  
Programme Search  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input  
jack on the control panel.  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,  
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same  
programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.  
PTY codes  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
Portable audio player,  
etc.  
2 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble)  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker  
balance.  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
R06 to F06  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
Preset values  
Indication (For)  
BAS TRE LOUD  
BAL (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
L06 to R06  
USER (Flat sound)  
00 00 OFF  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used  
for recording.  
1
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03 +01ON  
LOUD* (loudness)  
LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF  
Boost low and high frequencies to  
produce a well-balanced sound at a low  
volume level.  
+01–02 OFF  
+04 +01OFF  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
+02 00 ON  
+02 +03 OFF  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume.  
00 to 50  
(or 00 to 30)*3  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
BAS: Bass; TRE: Treble; LOUD: (loudness)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level  
to “00.”  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
Adjusting the sound  
2
3
*
*
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
General settings—PSM  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Finish.  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
Indication  
Item ( : Initial)  
DEMO ON  
Setting  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
DEMO  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds.  
Cancels.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
CLOCK H (Hour)  
CLOCK M (Minute)  
24H/12H  
0 23 (1 12)  
00 59  
:
:
:
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]  
See “Basic settings.”  
CD player section  
Audio amplifier section  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
24H  
12H  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
CLK ADJ*2  
AF-REG*2  
AUTO  
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time)  
data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
OFF  
AF  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches  
to another station (the programme may differ from the one currently  
received).  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Less than measurable limit  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
4
(4  
Bass:  
Treble:  
to 8 allowance)  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
AF REG  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to  
another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
®
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
OFF  
Cancels.  
General  
PTY-STBY*2  
TA VOL*2  
OFF, PTY codes  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes.  
Tuner section  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Frequency Range:  
VOL 00 VOL 50 (or [Initial: VOL 15]  
VOL 00 VOL 30)*3  
Grounding System:  
FM1/2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
FM3:  
AM:  
65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz  
MV: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
P-SEARCH*2  
DIMMER  
TEL  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search.  
Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
OFF  
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
:
Cancels.  
SCROLL*4  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
[MW Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
[MW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 μV  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less  
than 50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
HIGH PWR  
AUTO  
:
:
IF BAND  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
WIDE  
:
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
3 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation  
kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
In dash-mounting  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical  
connections before installing the unit.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
When you stand the unit, be careful not  
to damage the fuse on the rear.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT  
dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front,  
with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the  
speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this  
unit.  
Heat sink  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly in  
place.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
A/B  
C
D
Control panel/  
Hard case  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
G
E
F
Lock nut (M5)  
Power cord  
Washer (ø5)  
J
I
H
Handles  
Rubber cushion  
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm ; M5 × 15 mm)  
When using the optional stay  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Dashboard  
Typical connections  
Screw (option)  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Install the unit at an angle of less  
than 30˚.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the aerial cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to  
fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.  
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*  
Bracket*  
15 A fuse  
Fuse position 2  
Flat type screws (M5  
× 8 mm)*  
Fuse position 1  
Aerial  
terminal  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
Rear ground terminal  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body or  
chassis of the car  
Connect only the front speakers if your  
speaker system is two-speaker system.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting to the  
car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant  
12 V)  
White with black stripe  
Yellow *2  
Front speaker  
(left)  
White  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Fuse block  
Gray with black stripe  
The fuse blows.  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in  
the fuse block  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
Front speaker  
(right)  
Gray  
No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Green with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment or  
power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Rear speaker  
(left)  
Green  
Brown  
To cellular phone system  
Purple with black stripe  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
Rear speaker  
(right)  
Purple  
2
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G396S  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0554-001A  
[UI]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Sound adjustments.......................... 10  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 11  
Maintenance ................................... 13  
More about this unit ........................ 14  
Troubleshooting.............................. 16  
Specifications.................................. 17  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Attaching the control panel  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Disc information indicators—  
3
(standby/on attenuator) button  
4
Remote sensor  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(disc),  
(folder), RPT (repeat)  
g
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
h
j
k
l
q 4 / ¢ buttons  
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial  
BAND button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
/
z
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
3
4
5
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and  
12.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if  
there is no disc in the unit.  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Volume level appears.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing stations in memory  
Radio operations  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
! Start searching for a station.  
When a station is received,  
searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the  
same button again.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/  
WMA discs)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA discs) directly  
Clock Ô Frequency  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Disc operations  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Playing a disc in the unit  
~ Turn on the power.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA disc):  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
Other main functions  
(see page 12)  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
1
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
2
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
3
2
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
Changing the display information  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
FLDR RPT *  
:
:
The current track. [  
All tracks of the current folder.  
]
[
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Continued on the next page  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Random play  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
1
2
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.  
[
]
Cancels.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4  
Adjust the volume.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 12 for details.)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other external component  
operations  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table on page 12.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.  
Portable audio player, etc  
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 10.)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
Continued on the next page  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power  
Clock display  
is turned off.  
OFF  
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker  
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
1
*
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”  
that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
2
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connectors  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Center holder  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. This unit  
can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/WMA  
formats.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
Changing the source  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,  
disc play starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you  
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another  
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 64 characters  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
– Joliet: up to 32 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
93 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
178 mm × 50 mm × 160 mm  
AM:  
178 mm × 50 mm × 17 mm  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0308DTSMDTJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-S15  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
0508DTSMDTJEIN  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0561-001A  
[J]  
EN  
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ESPAÑOL  
ENGLISH  
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used  
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
To keep discs clean  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Caution  
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Do not use the following discs:  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.  
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Unusual shape  
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)  
PREPARATIONS  
[European Union only]  
How to reset your unit  
Detaching the control panel  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
Temperature inside the car...  
Caution on volume setting  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
General  
Basic operations  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD  
(CD-DA).  
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press  
SRC to select another playback source.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
Basic settings  
Enter PSM menu.  
Cancel the display  
demonstration  
Set the clock  
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”  
as the playback source.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be  
automatically tuned in.  
Adjust the hour.  
Adjust the minute.  
Deactivate the display  
demonstration.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the  
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Finish  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
1– EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose to strong light.  
Check the current clock time/other information.  
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”  
Control panel  
Remote controller—RM-RK50  
• Turn on the power.  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
7 Installing battery  
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent.  
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)  
• Store out of reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.  
• Do not dispose of in fire.  
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.  
Detach the panel.  
Select the source.  
Volume control.  
For USA-California Only: This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material—  
special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Display window  
7 Features  
Playback mode / item indicator  
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
• Selects the sound mode  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
Disc indicator  
• Selects the source.  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
Tr (track) indicator  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held.  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Volume level indicator  
• Time countdown indicator  
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed  
briefly.  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
Main display (time,  
playback information) indicator  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
Disc operations  
Radio operations  
Eject disc.  
• Press SRC to  
listen to another  
playback source.  
Select preset station.  
• You can also use 5 / to select preset station.  
4 / ¢  
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.  
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.  
[Press] Select track number (01 – 06).  
[Hold] Select track number (07 – 12).  
Select “FM/AM.”  
Select the bands.  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Selecting the playback modes  
Changing the display information  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
• MO indicator lights up.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.  
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...  
TRK RPT : Plays the current track  
repeatedly.  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current  
disc at random.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
Skipping a track quickly during play  
Example: Select track 32  
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
Manual presetting  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
External component operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the  
control panel.  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
Portable audio player, etc.  
Stereo mini plug (not supplied)  
SETTINGS  
LOUD*4 (loudness) : Boost low and high frequencies to LOUD ON or  
produce a well-balanced sound at LOUD OFF  
a low volume level.  
Sound adjustments  
Adjusting the sound  
SUB.W (subwoofer)  
VOL (volume)  
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level. 00 to 08  
Preset values  
BAS  
: Adjust the volume.  
00 to 50  
LOUD  
(loudness)  
MID  
TRE  
(or 00 to 30)*5  
(bass) (mid-range) (treble)  
Indication (For)  
BAS*2 (bass)  
MID*2 (mid-range) : Adjust the middle frequencies sound level. –06 to +06  
: Adjust the bass.  
–06 to +06  
1
*
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
USER (Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the adjustment you have made  
is stored for the currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be applied to all sound modes  
(iEQ).  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
+03  
+01  
+02  
+04  
+03  
+02  
+03  
+02  
+01  
+03  
TRE*2 (treble)  
FAD*3 (fader)  
BAL (balance)  
: Adjust the treble.  
–06 to +06  
00  
3
4
*
*
: Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. R06 to F06  
: Adjust the left and right speaker balance. L06 to R06  
+01  
–02  
00  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
5
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.  
See reverse page \  
2 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General settings—PSM  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Finish  
CD player section  
Audio amplifier section  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Power Output:  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4  
1% THD+N  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
and  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Indication  
DEMO  
Item ( : Initial) Setting  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4  
)
DEMO ON  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is  
done for about 20 seconds.  
Cancels.  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
4
(4  
Bass:  
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz  
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
load (full scale)  
to 8  
allowance)  
Less than measurable limit  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
CLK DISP*1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned  
General  
off.  
Frequency Response:  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
OFF  
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the  
power is turned off.  
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 k  
Output Impedance: 1 k  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
CLOCK H (Hour)  
1 12  
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]  
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 59  
DIMMER  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm  
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)  
Mass (approx.):  
Tuner section  
Frequency Range:  
SCROLL  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of  
the setting.  
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
L/O MODE  
WOOFER*2  
AUX ADJ  
REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the speakers  
(through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a subwoofer.  
WOOFER  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone  
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75  
LOW  
MID  
HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 35 dB  
)  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output  
level when changing the source from external component connected to the  
AUX input jack on the control panel.  
Please reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
[AM Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)  
http://www.jvc.com  
AMP GAIN*3  
AREA  
LOW PWR  
HIGH PWR  
AREA US  
AREA EU  
AREA SA  
:
:
:
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than  
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to  
10 kHz/200 kHz.  
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz  
(100 kHz during auto search).  
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/  
100kHz.  
PREPARATION  
You need the installation kits which corresponds to your car.  
• Mark all the check boxes (  
) to make sure you have follow the instructions and the listed parts.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than  
“VOL 30.”  
Check the battery system in your car  
2
3
*
*
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Prepare this before installation  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The buttons on the unit do not work as you If you press M MODE, some buttons work differently from it  
intended.  
original function. Wait for 5 seconds or press M MODE again.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc ejects.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used  
for recording.  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
3 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
A
D
B
C
Control panel  
Power cord  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
G
I
J
K
Mounting bolt—  
M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4");  
M5 x 12.5 mm (M5 x 1/2")  
E
F
H
Handles  
Remote controller  
Battery  
Washer (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Rubber cushion  
INSTALLATION  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
In dash-mounting  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
When you stand the unit, be careful not to  
damage the fuse on the rear.  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
When using the optional stay  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
Stay (option)  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Dashboard  
Bracket*  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws  
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*  
Install the unit at an angle of  
less than 30˚.  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Make sure to disconnect the battery’s negative terminal.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
High  
Note:  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the  
maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page “General setting — PSM“ of the INSTRUCTIONS.).  
Heat sink  
Typical connections  
Rear ground terminal  
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer  
Remote lead  
Y-connector *1  
Rear line out  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Antenna  
terminal  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”  
(See “General settings—PSM.”)  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
15 A fuse  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
or automatic antenna if any  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body  
or chassis of the car  
Connect only the front speakers if your  
speaker system is two-speaker system.  
JVC Amplifier  
Rear  
speakers  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting to the  
car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant  
12 V)  
White with black stripe  
Right  
Yellow *2  
Front speakers  
Left  
Not supplied for this unit.  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER”  
(See “General settings—PSM.”)  
You can also connect a subwoofer to  
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
Front speaker (left)  
White  
1
2
*
*
Fuse block  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis  
of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,  
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may  
cause damage to the unit.  
Gray with black stripe  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in  
the fuse block  
3
*
Front speaker (right) Gray  
Green with black stripe  
or  
JVC Amplifier  
Subwoofer  
Blue with white  
stripe  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic antenna if  
any (200 mA max.)  
4
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Rear speaker (left)  
Green  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
Purple with black stripe  
Rear speaker (right)  
Purple  
4 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
KD-G347  
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION  
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with  
symbol).  
1207DTSMDTJEIN  
GET0491-001B  
[EE]  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,  
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,  
etc.).  
Basic operations  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc  
play will start from where it had been stopped previously  
next time you turn on the power.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
Tuner operations  
• During SSM search...  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be  
automatically tuned in.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the  
letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for  
MP3 files and for WMA files  
[European Union only]  
For safety...  
Warning  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block  
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to  
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic  
accident.  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the  
preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the  
preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is also  
activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-  
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without  
deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other  
characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Caution on volume setting  
Temperature inside the car...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.  
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,  
Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names  
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level  
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;  
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up  
to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,  
and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit  
rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.  
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after  
performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an  
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.  
PREPARATIONS  
How to reset your unit  
Detaching the control panel  
Reset the unit after installation is complete.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with  
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the  
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,  
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD  
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Attaching the control panel  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice  
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-  
protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this  
unit:  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside  
the unit.  
Basic settings  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
MAINTENANCE  
How to clean the connectors  
Wipe the connectors with  
a cotton swab or cloth  
To keep discs clean  
Adjust.  
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to  
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or  
benzene.  
Finish  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or  
“12H” (hour).  
moistened with alcohol.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
To play new discs  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject  
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture has evaporated.  
Remove any rough areas from the inner and  
outer edges of the disc.  
Available characters on the display  
Available characters  
Display indications  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
Sticker and sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
C-thru Disc (semi-  
transparent disc)  
Transparent or semi-transparent  
parts on its recording area  
Unusual shape  
1– EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATIONS  
Basic operations  
Radio operations  
Control panel  
Check the current clock time/other information.  
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”  
Note:  
• Turn on the power.  
• Turn off the power [Hold].  
• Attenuate the sound (if the  
power is on).  
FM1 and FM2:  
87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz  
FM3:  
65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz  
Select preset station.  
Detach the panel.  
Select “FM/AM.”  
Select the source.  
Volume control.  
Select the bands.  
*You cannot select “CD” as the playback  
source if there is no disc in the unit.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.  
Display window  
MO: Lights up in monaural mode.  
ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Playback mode / item indicator  
Disc indicator  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
• MO indicator lights up.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.  
Disc information indicators  
Tr (track) indicator  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
RDS indicators  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
• Source display  
• Track number  
• Folder number  
• Volume level indicator  
• Time countdown indicator  
Main display (time,  
playback information) indicator  
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer)  
Manual presetting  
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Eject disc.  
• Press SRC to  
listen to another  
playback source.  
FM RDS operations  
Storing your favourite programme type  
You can store six favourite programme types.  
Searching for your favourite FM RDS  
programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favourite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
4 / ¢  
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* number  
Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):  
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.  
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.  
5 / : Go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA discs).  
(01 – 06).  
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* number  
(07 – 12).  
* Folders are required to assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning.  
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Example: Storing “ROCK M” into preset number 4.  
Select a PTY code.  
Turn on the power.  
Insert disc.  
Select one of your favourite programme  
types or a PTY code.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.  
or  
Selecting the playback modes  
Changing the display information  
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...  
If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code  
as you have selected, that station is  
tuned in.  
TRK RPT : Plays the current track  
repeatedly.  
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current  
folder repeatedly.  
Finish.  
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or  
CD or CD Text  
a WMA disc  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
A = B = Disc title/  
performer*1 = Track  
title*1 = (back to the  
beginning)  
A = B = Album name/  
performer (folder name*2)  
= Track title (file name*2)  
= (back to the beginning)  
FLDR RND* : Plays all tracks of the current  
folder, then the tracks of the  
next folder at random.  
Standby receptions  
Tracing the same programme —  
TA Standby Reception  
Network-Tracking Reception  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “General settings—PSM.”  
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current  
disc at random.  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
A
: The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
: Clock with the current track number  
B
To activate/deactivate  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated.  
To activate TA Standby Reception,  
tune in to another station providing  
RDS signals required for TA Standby  
Reception.  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is  
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.  
2
Skipping a track quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track within the  
same folder.  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency  
areas (01 – 05)  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
Example: Select track 32  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favourite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.  
To activate and select your favourite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see “General settings—PSM.”  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station providing these signals.  
External component operations  
Automatic station selection —  
Programme Search  
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input  
jack on the control panel.  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,  
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same  
programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.  
PTY codes  
Turn on the connected  
component and start  
playing the source.  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
Stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
Portable audio player,  
etc.  
2 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Sound adjustments  
BAS*1 (bass)  
Adjust the bass.  
TRE*1 (treble)  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*2 (fader)  
Adjust the front and rear speaker  
balance.  
–06 to +06  
–06 to +06  
R06 to F06  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• This unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
Preset values  
Indication (For)  
BAS TRE LOUD  
BAL (balance)  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
LOUD*1 (loudness)  
Boost low and high frequencies to  
produce a well-balanced sound at a low  
volume level.  
L06 to R06  
USER (Flat sound)  
00 00 OFF  
+03 +01 ON  
+01 –02 OFF  
+04 +01 OFF  
+02 00 ON  
+02 +03 OFF  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used  
for recording.  
ROCK (Rock or disco music)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
POPS (Light music)  
LOUD ON or  
LOUD OFF  
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.  
• Eject the disc forcibly.  
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
VOL (volume)  
Adjust the volume.  
00 to 50  
(or 00 to 30)*3  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
BAS: Bass; TRE: Treble; LOUD: (loudness)  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level  
to “00.”  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
Adjusting the sound  
2
3
*
*
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension  
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
General settings—PSM  
• A longer readout time is required  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
Enter PSM menu.  
Select an item.  
Adjust.  
Finish.  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
have intended.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
Indication  
Item ( : Initial)  
DEMO ON  
Setting  
• The correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a  
limited number of symbols.  
DEMO  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds.  
Cancels.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
DEMO OFF  
ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
CLOCK H (Hour)  
CLOCK M (Minute)  
24H/12H  
0 23 (1 12)  
00 59  
:
:
:
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]  
See “Basic settings.”  
CD player section  
Audio amplifier section  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
24H  
12H  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
CLK ADJ*2  
AF-REG*2  
AUTO  
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time)  
data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
Number of channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
OFF  
AF  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches  
to another station (the programme may differ from the one currently  
received).  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Less than measurable limit  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
4
(4  
Bass:  
Treble:  
to 8 allowance)  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
12 dB at 100 Hz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
AF REG  
OFF  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to  
another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Other Terminal:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
®
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
Cancels.  
General  
PTY-STBY*2  
TA VOL*2  
OFF,  
PTY  
codesActivates PTY  
Standby  
Reception  
with  
one  
of  
the  
PTY  
.
codes  
Tuner section  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Frequency Range:  
FM1/2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
VOL 00 VOL 50 (or [Initial: VOL 15]  
VOL 00 VOL 30)*3  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
FM3:  
AM:  
65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz  
MV: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
P-SEARCH*2  
DIMMER  
TEL  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search.  
Cancels.  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
OFF  
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
:
Cancels.  
SCROLL*4  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
[MW Tuner]  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
[MW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 μV  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less  
than 50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
HIGH PWR  
AUTO  
:
:
IF BAND  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
WIDE  
:
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
3 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,  
which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation  
kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
In dash-mounting  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical  
connections before installing the unit.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
When you stand the unit, be careful not  
to damage the fuse on the rear.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT  
dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front,  
with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the  
speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).  
Do the required electrical  
connections.  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this  
unit.  
Heat sink  
Bend the appropriate tabs  
to hold the sleeve firmly in  
place.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
A/B  
C
D
Control panel/  
Hard case  
Sleeve  
Trim plate  
G
E
F
Lock nut (M5)  
Power cord  
Washer (ø5)  
J
I
H
Handles  
Rubber cushion  
Mounting bolt  
(M4 × 5 mm ; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
When using the optional stay  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Dashboard  
Typical connections  
Screw (option)  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this  
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Install the unit at an angle of less  
than 30˚.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the aerial cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to  
fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.  
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.  
* Not supplied for this unit.  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*  
Bracket*  
15 A fuse  
Fuse position 2  
Flat type screws (M5  
× 8 mm)*  
Fuse position 1  
Aerial  
terminal  
Pocket  
Bracket*  
Rear ground terminal  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body or  
chassis of the car  
Connect only the front speakers if your  
speaker system is two-speaker system.  
To a live terminal in the  
fuse block connecting to the  
car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant  
12 V)  
White with black stripe  
Yellow *2  
Front speaker  
(left)  
White  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Fuse block  
Gray with black stripe  
The fuse blows.  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in  
the fuse block  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
Front speaker  
(right)  
Gray  
No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
Blue with white  
stripe  
Green with black stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment or  
power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Rear speaker  
(left)  
Green  
Brown  
To cellular phone system  
Purple with black stripe  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
Rear speaker  
(right)  
Purple  
2
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
4 – EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Insignia Computer Monitor NS 32D120A13 User Manual
Jasco Camcorder HO98756 User Manual
Johnson Hardware Door IN11385D User Manual
JVC Camera Accessories RM HP250AU User Manual
JVC DVD Player UXQD90S User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television HD 56FC97 User Manual
JVC Security Camera VR 609U User Manual
Kenmore Vacuum Cleaner 11622822 User Manual
Kenmore Water Heater 153329264 38 GALLON SHORT User Manual
King Canada Drill KC 110C User Manual